JP7443026B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, it is possible to notify the effect result by the movement of the movable body (effect image). There are methods that emphasize body movements (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-99572

However, in Patent Document 1, since the effect image is only displayed on the image display unit when the movable body performs the performance operation, there is a problem that the game cannot be enjoyed.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body that is operable;
A display means capable of displaying a staged image;
a production execution means capable of executing a specific production that displays a specific character on the display means to suggest the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance,
a first specific effect that displays the specific character in a first mode in which a display ratio of specific components and non-specific components of the specific character is a first ratio;
The specific character is displayed in a mode different from the first mode, and the display ratio of the specific component and the non-specific component in the specific character is lower than the first ratio. a second specific effect that is displayed in a second mode having a second proportion in which the proportion of the constituent elements is high;
The specific character is displayed in a mode different from the first mode and the second mode, and the display ratio of the specific component and the non-specific component in the specific character is lower than the first ratio. a third specific effect that is displayed in a third mode in which the specific component has a high proportion in the specific character;
is executable,
The performance execution means is
The first specific effect can be executed without executing the second specific effect after executing the third specific effect,
The first specific effect can be executed after the second specific effect is executed without executing the third specific effect,
The first aspect is such that a percentage difference in the display percentage of the specific component in the specific character between the first percentage and the second percentage is a difference between the first percentage and the third percentage. is smaller than a percentage difference in the display ratio of the specific component in the specific character, and is more similar to the second embodiment than the third embodiment;
The rate at which the first specific effect is executed without executing the second specific effect after the third specific effect is executed is such that the second specific effect is executed without executing the third specific effect. Unlike the rate at which the first specific effect is executed after being executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect of displaying a non-specific character different from the specific character in the third mode as the third specific effect,
In the third specific performance, when the specific character is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the non-specific character is displayed, and the displayed specific character and the Non-specific characters do not change into other characters,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a restriction means for restricting execution of a new third specific effect when the third specific effect is being executed.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a production image;
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestive effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion production B is being executed. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5), the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms),
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, (portion where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. (portion where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the 2 enlarged display periods),
moreover,
A special effect that displays a special character (for example, ally character B-3/in the examples, the special character is expressed as a specific character, but they have the same meaning) on the display means to give a suggestion regarding the advantageous state. (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control/Note that in the examples, special effects are expressed as specific effects, but they have the same meaning),
The performance execution means includes, as the special performance,
a first special effect (for example, reach effect of super reach β) that displays the special character in a first mode (for example, ally character B-3 whose head and body do not change);
The special character is displayed in a second mode that is different from the first mode and in which the display ratio of special components of the special character is higher than that of the first mode (for example, the head and body are changed from ally character B-3 to A second special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-2) displayed on the lowered ally character B-2);
The special character is displayed in a third mode that is different from the first mode and the second mode and in which the display ratio of the special component is higher than the first mode (for example, when the ally character B-3 is displayed as an ally) A third special effect (for example, a reserved display preview effect or an active display preview effect of display pattern β) displayed by an ally character B-1 whose head and body are lower than character B-2;
is executable,
The first aspect is better than the third aspect because the difference in the display ratio of the special component with the second aspect is smaller than the difference in the display ratio of the special component with the third aspect. is also similar to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19(B), the difference in head and body between ally character B-3 and ally character B-2 is about one head, Since the head and body difference between character B-3 and ally character B-1 is approximately 1.5 head and body, the head and body difference is approximately 0.5 head and height higher than that of ally character B-1. (parts that are similar characters),
The ratio at which the first special performance is performed after the third special performance is performed is different from the ratio at which the first special performance is performed after the second special performance is performed (for example, in FIG. As shown in Figure 22, the rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern β is the same as the rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2. higher than the rate at which the reach effect is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, depending on whether the special character is displayed in the second mode or the third mode, the rate at which the special character is subsequently displayed in the first mode, which has the lowest display rate, changes. It is possible to draw attention to whether the special character is displayed in the first mode or the third mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means 2 to 6 below. This corresponds to the fact that in a gaming machine that has conventionally executed a pending continuous notification effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-99309, the continuous continuous notification effect has been executed until the next jackpot. When displaying a specific display, if the specific display is not erased normally due to a malfunction or the like, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust. This was made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform effects.
(2) Gaming machines other than those for achieving the above purpose:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 010AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
Erase effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, A production control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, missing a variable pattern command or an error in the erasure effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, It is also possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step 010AKS045).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
A game control means (for example, main board 11, game control microcomputer 100, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (for example, performance control board 12, performance control CPU 120) that controls the performance based on information from the game control means,
The performance control means controls the game control when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to failure to normally receive information (for example, a variable pattern designation command) from the game control means at the start of the variable display. The special control may be executable based on information (for example, a winning start designation command) received from the means at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The advantageous state start effect executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state is set to have a higher display priority than the specific display,
During the effect period at the start of the advantageous state, the specific display may be erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-9 (H) to (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(5) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (2) to (4) above,
There are multiple predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing later than the last timing among a plurality of predetermined timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased in a situation where there is still time to execute the specific display erasing effect and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(6) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (2) to (5) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event while the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the first mode at the specific timing. It may be possible to perform control for changing the mode to the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the second mode from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. It is a figure which shows the update example of a 1st pending storage display area and a 2nd pending storage display area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 being off and super reach α2 being off. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 being off and super reach β2 being off. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable object suggesting motion and the image enlargement rate in each enlarged display period. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows the performance mode up to the reach performance in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. 3 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart showing production control process processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a pre-read notice setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not a pending display notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of a display pattern. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the cut-in effect determination process, and (B) is a flowchart showing whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing display modes of ally characters, and (C) is a diagram illustrating the head and body of each ally character and applied effects. It is a diagram showing each execution period of a cut-in effect, a hold display preview effect, and a super reach effect. (A) is a timing chart showing the execution period of the cut-in effect in the variable display of Super Reach and the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach, and (B) is a timing chart showing the execution period of the hold display preview effect during the variable display of Super Reach. This is a timing chart when (A) shows the relationship between the ratio of ally character A-3 being displayed after ally character A-1 is displayed and the ratio of ally character A-3 being displayed and leaving after ally character A-2 is displayed. It is an explanatory diagram, and (B) shows the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-1 is displayed, and the rate at which ally character B-3 is displayed and left after ally character B-2 is displayed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the relationship between proportions. It is a figure of the production mode of a cut-in production and a reach production. It is a figure of the production mode of a pending display notice production and a reach production. It is a figure of the production mode of a cut-in production and a reach production. It is a figure of the production mode of a pending display notice production and a reach production. It is a figure of the performance mode of the active display notice performance in modification 043SG-1. It is an explanatory diagram of the execution timing of the active display notice performance in modification 043SG-1. It is a figure which shows the special figure display result determination table in modification 043SG-2.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). As shown, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion production B. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5, the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1ms, whereas the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, portions where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period and the second 2. Part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of enlarged display and to reduce the control load related to the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
A non-enlargement period during which the specific image is not enlarged after the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, a movable body movement effect or a miss notification effect starts from the end timing of the enlarged display period) period until the timing),
The display mode during the non-enlargement period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-enlargement period (for example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, the image display device 5 does not display a specific effect or display an effect image. (The portion where the display mode of the image is made different from the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period by displaying, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a non-expansion period.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or Form 3,
The effect execution means is capable of gradually enlarging and displaying the specific image even after the repeated operation of the movable body is completed (for example, in the third enlarged display period shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). (the part that performs enlarged display),
The enlargement speed at the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed at the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlarged display period is larger than the first enlarged display period). slow speed part),
The enlargement speed of the enlarged display after the repeated operation of the movable body is completed is slower than the enlargement speed at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, 3. The enlarged display period is a part where the enlargement speed is slower than the 2nd enlarged display period)
According to this feature, since the enlarged display of the specific image continues even after the repetitive motion of the movable body is finished, the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 4,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a preview performance (for example, a pre-read preview performance) that foretells that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the preview effect is restricted (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the advance preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period). (part that restricts execution)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing to a specific image due to the execution of the preview effect.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 5,
The effect executing means may be arranged such that the visibility of the specific image differs between when operating the movable body in the suggestive effect and when operating the movable body in the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 10-32 and 10-32). As shown in FIG. 34, the player can see the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. is the part where the visibility of the reach effect is reduced due to the explosion effect image 109SG005B being displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of a specific image changes depending on the operating state of the movable body, so it becomes easy to understand whether the motion is a suggestive performance motion or a specific performance motion, and it is also possible to distinguish between the movable body and the specific image. The degree of attention can be adjusted.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in Modified Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image). A part that can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the action and the effect image according to the progress of the battle performance),
The sizes of the first effect image and the second effect image are different (for example, as a modified example 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of an explosion corresponding to the movement of a movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of a battle production) (parts that differ in size)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable object and the specific image.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 7,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in Modified Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image). A part that can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the action and the effect image according to the progress of the battle performance),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modified example 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of an explosion according to the movement of a movable body and the progress of a battle production (The part where the image transparency differs from the corresponding effect image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable object and the specific image.

Type 9 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
Different types of performance sounds can be output before and after the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, during execution of the moving body motion suggestion performance, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). , SE, the part that outputs BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R while the movable body movement performance is being performed).
The types of effect sounds during the predetermined period are smaller than the types of effect sounds that were output immediately before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during period T3 is the part where only SE is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of performance sound changes before and after the predetermined period when the movable body does not move.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
The predetermined period is a period longer than the execution period of one unit motion in which the movable body is repeatedly operated, and shorter than a period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position),
The operation period of the movable body in the specific performance is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is , a portion that is shorter than the period T2 in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent movements in a specific performance from being mistakenly recognized as movements in a suggestion performance, and also to prevent the period of suggestion from being longer than the period of movement of the movable body in the specific performance of the suggestion target. It is also possible to prevent a decline in interest due to such factors.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
During the predetermined period, at least the visibility of the background image is set to a first low visibility state (for example, as a modification example 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed). During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state lower than before the end of the enlarged display period),
When the movable body starts operating after the predetermined period, a second low visibility state is set in which the visibility is lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as a modification 109SG04, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are changed). (a portion in which the visibility of the friendly character and the enemy character is further reduced by changing the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state that is even lower),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period of time, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movement of the movable body in the specific performance.

The gaming machine according to Form 12 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
It is possible to display a specific image while executing the specific effect and when executing the suggestive effect, and to gradually enlarge and display the specific image while executing the suggestive effect (for example, As shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged. and, during the reach performance of Super Reach β2, ally character B and enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged).
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
The movement of the movable body is started before the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Modification 109SG-1, the movable body is moved at a timing before starting the enlarged display of the friendly character and the enemy character). (The part that performs body movement suggestion)
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period of time, and it is also possible to increase attention to the repetitive motion of the movable body in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 9 to 12,
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, movable body LED109SG495) that can emit light,
The effect execution means controls the light emitting unit to a non-emission state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, from the end of the third enlarged display period, the movable body movement effect or (The part that turns off the movable LED109SG495 during the period until the start of the failure notification performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period in which the movable body is not operating.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 13,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 109SG402L and a third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body. including
The performance execution means is
In the repetitive motion of the suggested effect, only one of the first movable body or the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the movable body motion suggestion effect B Now, the part that moves only the first movable body 109SG401),
In the operation of the specific performance, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, in movable body motion performance B, the first movable body and the second movable body are The part that operates all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the motion of the movable body is a motion of a suggestive effect or a motion of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 14,
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, movable body LED109SG495) that can emit light,
The performance execution means is
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the light emitting section is caused to emit light at a first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period and during the second In the enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period, the movable LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at a brightness C1),
In the specific performance, at least during the period in which the performance result is announced, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light at a second brightness that is higher than the first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23). , while the movable body movement performance is being executed, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize that it is the period in which the performance results are shown, and the interest of the period can also be improved.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
It is possible to display a specific image while executing the specific effect and when executing the suggestive effect, and to gradually enlarge and display the specific image while executing the suggestive effect (for example, As shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged. (The part that displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach effect of Super Reach β2, and enlarges and displays these ally character B and enemy character B)
When the movable body is operated in the suggestive effect, it is possible to display a different type of effect image from the effect image displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example, , as a modified example 109SG-5, a part where different effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body movement effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect),
In the suggestive effect, the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated is greater than the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect. (For example, as a modified example 109SG-5, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. (the part that is larger than the number of types of directed images),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, many types of effect images are displayed during the suggestive performance in which an action is repeated, so that the interest during the suggestive performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestive performance, it is possible to display a suggestive motion corresponding image corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as modification example 109SG-6, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive performance, the image display device 5 displays a suggestive motion corresponding to the motion of the movable body. (a part that displays an image corresponding to a movable body motion suggestion production corresponding to a motion suggestion production),
In the specific performance, it is possible to display a performance motion corresponding image corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, while the movable body motion performance is being performed, the image display device 5 displays the motion of the movable body). (a portion displaying an image different from the movable body action suggestion production compatible image as a movable body motion production compatible image corresponding to the production);
The period during which the suggested motion compatible image is displayed is different from the period during which the performance motion compatible image is displayed (for example, as a variation 109SG-6, the display period of the movable body motion suggestive performance compatible image and the movable body motion compatible image are parts that vary the display period of images),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display period of the suggestive action corresponding image and the production action corresponding image can be set to a period corresponding to each movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine described in Form 17,
When displaying the performance action compatible image, the performance execution means controls the display to a low visibility state in which visibility is reduced (for example, as modification example 109SG-6, the display device 5 displays the movable body motion performance compatible image). When displayed, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are lowered to reduce the visibility of the movable body motion effect image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase attention to the movable body that moves in a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The performance execution means is
During the period in which the suggestive action corresponding image is displayed, it is possible to output a suggestive action corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive action corresponding image (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, the movable body action suggestive effect corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5). When displaying, a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance compatible image from the speaker 8L8R),
During the period of displaying the performance action corresponding image, it is possible to output a performance sound corresponding to the performance action corresponding image, which is different from the suggested action corresponding sound (for example, as modified example 109SG-6). , when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion performance on the image display device 5, a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body motion performance corresponding to the image compatible with the movable body motion performance from the speaker 8L8R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to output sounds according to each corresponding image displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 17 to 19,
The effect execution means is characterized in that it displays the image corresponding to the effect action before the start timing of the movement of the movable body in the specific effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase expectations for the start of the movement of the movable body in a specific performance, and it is also possible to further increase attention to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance (for example, movable body movement performance A) that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body, and operating the movable body by displaying a special image before the specific performance is executed. A suggestive effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed without any action (for example, on the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. body motion suggestion performance A);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a manner approaching the movable body at a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when executing the movable body motion effect A, , in the image display device 5, a portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in such a manner that it moves away from the movable object at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, When body motion production A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, during execution of movable body motion suggestion effect is a portion where images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-30, during the reach effect of super reach α1, ally character A and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of Super Reach α2),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the special image stand out, and also to draw attention to the movable body by moving the special image, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movement of the movable body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance (for example, movable body motion performance A) that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body, and the movable body gradually approaches the movable body at a first speed before the specific performance is executed. A suggestive effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed without operating the movable body by displaying a special image (for example, on the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed of V1) The movable body motion suggestion effect A) of moving toward the movable body 109SG401 at speed V1, and the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10-19) part) and
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestive effect, the special image is displayed in a manner that acts repeatedly at a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body movement effect A is executed, the image display In the device 5, a portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed as moving toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in such a manner that it moves away from the movable object at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, When body motion production A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, effect images other than the special image are displayed in a low-visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, a moving object motion suggesting effect During the execution of A, the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-30, during the reach effect of super reach α1, ally character A and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the special image stand out, and also to draw attention to the movable body by moving the special image, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movement of the movable body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to Form 21 or Form 22,
The performance execution means hides the special image for a predetermined period immediately before the start timing of the movable body in the specific performance (as shown in FIGS. 10-28(F) and 10-30(F)). (Before executing the movable body movement effect A or the deviation notification effect, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the special image is not displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is started.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 21 to 23,
The first speed is a speed within a predetermined range, and within the predetermined range, the first speed changes according to the proximity of the special image (for example, as shown in Modification Example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is set to a predetermined range). (variable within the range),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed in the predetermined range (for example, as shown in modification example 109SG-7, the speed of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S when moving body motion production A is executed) Regarding V2, the part where the speed is faster than the maximum speed of speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the moving speed of the special image changes, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 21 to 24,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to output a plurality of motion sound effects corresponding to the repeated motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image (for example, output a plurality of sounds as motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R). possible part),
It is possible to output different action sound effects depending on the output timing (for example, by setting multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound, and determining at which timing the output of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound starts. (The part that can output different sounds from speakers 8L and 8R depending on the situation)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the repeating motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image is being executed, and since the motion sound effect changes depending on the output timing, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting a “normal pattern” in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 109SG)
Next, the feature section 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 109S, a movable unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410, as shown in FIG. 10-3(A). A first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, and a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction. A third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. For this reason, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this feature section 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Furthermore, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5, by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421. (see FIG. 10-3(A)), a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(B)), an effect that is above the suggested position and is also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to any position (see Figure 10-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the retracted position (FIG. 10 10-3(A)) to a position adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (see FIG. 10-3(C)).

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable unit 109SG400 is that the first movable body 109SG401 is in the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are in the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position, and the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right adjacent positions is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 109SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 109SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 109SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 109SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 109SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 109SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that shifts, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that shifts to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control associated with time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of jackpot states with few prize balls obtained can be avoided. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 109SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this feature section 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 109SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Super Reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (Super Reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern) Determine from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, while PB1-2, PB1 -3, the numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-4 and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are judged for PB1-1, 45 pieces are judged for PB1-2, 150 pieces are judged for PB1-3, 300 pieces are judged for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are judged for PB1-5. A value is assigned to each. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, there are 2 judgment values for PB1-1, 30 judgment values for PB1-2, 135 judgment values for PB1-3, 315 judgment values for PB1-4, and 515 judgment values for PB1-5. assigned to each. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. or PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do. In other words, in the present feature section 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 variation variation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviance), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α1 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this feature section 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between an ally character A and an enemy character A as a super reach performance. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, as for the jackpot expectation of each variable display in this feature section 109SG, the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is set to be the highest, and henceforth, super reach β1, super reach α2 , the jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach (jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature section 109SG: super reach β2 > super reach β1 > super reach α2 > super reach α1 >Normal Reach > Non-Reach).

In other words, if we pay attention to the variable display of Super Reach, this feature section 109SG can determine whether the ally character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of Super Reach) is ally character A or ally character B. The expectation level of the jackpot differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 109SG includes a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 109SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 109SG191, a production control timer setting section 109SG192, a production control counter setting section 109SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 109SG194. We are prepared.

The effect control flag setting section 109SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 109SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the feature section 109SG, a pending display flag is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that data can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning hole, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start-up winning determination process of the feature section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (Step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 109SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 109SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process in step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 109SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 109 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 109 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 109SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 109SGS128). 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 109SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern judgment table A for a loss, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the possible ranges of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Proceed to 109SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 109SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 109SGS224 is a second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (109SGS228; Y), and in step 109SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the free space in the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending memory number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which the received command is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to store the reserved storage number notification command. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the pending memory number notification command will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and if there is a pending memory (entry) for which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether there is one (step 109SGS242a). If there is no pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is any pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

In addition, whether or not the super reach reach effect is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether the variable display is being executed or not) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by referring to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and if the super reach reach effect is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a loss or a jackpot. If it is a symbol designation command (Step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a loss) (Step 109SGS243b) .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence or absence of a pre-read preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the ratio of display pattern β being determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio of display pattern α being determined. It is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot is increased, and the player's expectations for a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern α or the white star in which the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) is always decided to execute the pre-read preview effect. Although one of the display patterns β, which is displayed in the shape of a star (☆), is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable Similarly to the case where the display result is "miss", a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect.

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and the execution/non-execution of the advance notice effect are varied depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in Figure 10-16, if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-conformity". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than in the case of ``Reach''. In addition, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect when the variable display result is "miss", if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variable pattern category when the variable display result is “miss”.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)", "miss (super reach)", or "miss (other)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probable jackpot)" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the preview preview effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially if the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable variable jackpot". This increases the player's expectations.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance was determined in step 109SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After executing step 109SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending storage display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, in step 109SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250) and proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, as described above, even when the reach effect of Super Reach is being executed (Step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (Step 109SGS243a), the entry After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A are changed according to the stored contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in Figure 10-17. , if the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed in the display mode of "☆" will be displayed at In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 10-17, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will be the pending display of the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "○", and the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "☆" in the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. Is displayed. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 10-17, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (the screen (towards the center).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory are It will now be displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U.

Note that although this characteristic section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 109SG005D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

Furthermore, in step 109SGS242, this feature section 109SG determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting prize on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing is performed in step 109SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the advance notice effect. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the hold display flag of ``1'' or ``2'' indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the 1st special figure and the hold of the 2nd special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special symbol This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is set to ``1-0'' to ``1-4''. Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, the stop symbol is a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance is selected. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Also, a first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). Note that the first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including the image data that indicates the display state of the decorative pattern at the center left, into the VRAM every time the first time elapses. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 10-20).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. Take control. As a result, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After executing step 109SGS288, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the production process during variable display (step The variable display start setting process is set to a value corresponding to S172) and ends the variable display start setting process (Step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). Further, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

In addition, after executing step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process advances to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

Note that if the variable display is not a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processing of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. The process then proceeds to step 109SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) in the variable display including the left-center right decorative pattern. The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapsed time is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (video display control) are realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each production device during the ready-to-reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the feature section 109SG will be explained. The presentation mode of the variable display will be explained based on FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 starts, the first enlarged display period , the character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (for the reach effect of super reach α1, the ally character A and the enemy character A, and for the reach effect of super reach α2) If so, an enlarged display of friendly character A and enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 in the third enlarged display period. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. .

Note that in the present characteristic section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. is the smallest. That is, in this feature section 109SG, regarding the enlargement speed of the character image, the enlargement speed during the first enlarged display period is set to be the fastest, and the enlargement speed during the third enlarged display period is set to be the slowest (enlargement speed of character image: (first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). Note that in the feature section 109SG, "the enlargement speed is fast" means that the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large.

Thereafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period that combines the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed) is set as period T2, and the third enlarged display period and the character image The period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-21, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retreat position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the failure notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. Regarding these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period, and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body is A movable body motion suggestion production A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the above-mentioned movable body motion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 over a period T4. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5. Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body motion representation A in the main feature section 109SG is also a representation in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body motion suggestion representation A.

Furthermore, during the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 also emits light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable LED 109SG495 is activated during the period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and during the period T3 (more accurately, during the period T3). The movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1 over a period T4.

Also, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: BGM of music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound. The type of sound that is output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a performance sound that is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, like BGM, SE (sound effect) is a sound effect that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the output of SE in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the entire ready-to-win performance.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body motion suggestion production A. In other words, the motion suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body motion suggestion performance A, and is not output during other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body movement effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only during the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion performance A when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and is not output during other periods.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 starts, the first enlarged display period, Character images displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach effect of super reach β1, and character images displayed in the reach effect of super reach β2) Enlarged display of friendly character B and enemy character B) is executed.

From now on, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emitting mode of the movable body LED109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in Figure 10- Since this is the same mode as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2 shown in FIGS. 21 and 10-22, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 10-23, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display will be displayed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions close to the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retracted positions. A movable body motion effect B is executed to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable body performance B is a performance that is executed over a period T4, like the above-mentioned movable body performance A and the failure notification performance.

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period), A movable body motion suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retreat position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the motion suggestion performance is executed, the movable body motion suggestion performance is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Further, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when comparing the movable body motion suggestion performance A and the movable body motion suggestion performance B, it is found that the movable body motion suggestion performance A produces a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S acts repeatedly on the first movable body 109SG401 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself The difference is that the movable body motion suggestion performance B does not move, whereas the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retreat position and the suggested position. On the other hand, movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(B), when comparing movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B, movable body motion performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the production position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. Movable body movement performance B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position. This is an effect of moving the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state, and the display in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are spread from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 is not executed. This is different from movable body motion performance A. Furthermore, movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) and 10-27(B), after a while after the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 starts, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time further passes in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started as a reach performance (Figure 10-27 (C ) and Figure 10-28 (A)), and if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 10-27 (D) and (See Figure 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach effect (see Figures 10-27 (E) and 10 -32 (A)), if the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 10-27 (F) and Figure 10- 34(A)).

In addition, at the start of these super reach reach performances, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The ornamental symbols that have been displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" ornamental symbols are temporarily rendered invisible.

As shown in Figures 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when reaching the second half of the battle performance that is the reach performance of Super Reach α1, as shown in Figure 10-28 (C), allies Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) to 10-28(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character A and enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28(D) to 10-28(F)), the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed first on the image display device 5. It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character A, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(E) to 10-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Display at. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (H) and FIG. 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edges of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as a reach performance of Super Reach α2, as shown in Figure 10-30 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(C) to 10-30(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character A and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30(D) to 10-30(F)), the images of friendly character A and enemy character B are It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character B, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) to FIG. 10-31 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β1, as shown in Figure 10-32 (C) Then, a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(C) to 10-32(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(D) and 10-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-33 (G) to FIG. 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, ally character B and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β2, as shown in Figure 10-34 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(C) to 10-34(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(D) and 10-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character B are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, the ally character B An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, as shown in 10-31 to 10-35. On the other hand, while the movable body movement effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the image of the friendly character or enemy character during the reach effect is enlarged by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B. Since the performance of the movable body motion performance B by the display and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the magnification speed of each character's image is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, thereby improving the production effect during the enlarged display period. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body movement performance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlarged display period has a slower enlargement speed than the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect ends. Since the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the friendly character and the enemy character continues even after the movable body motion suggestion performance ends, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, although the mode in which the enlargement speed in the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest. The expansion speed in the third expansion display period may be the fastest, the expansion speed in the first expansion display period may be the slowest, or the expansion speed in the second expansion display period may be the fastest.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, execution of the look-ahead preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. can be prevented from decreasing. In addition, although this feature section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted throughout the execution period of the reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is The period during which execution is restricted may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as a form of restricting the execution of the pre-read preview effect, a mode in which the pre-read preview effect is not executed during the reach-to-reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and During the performance, the preview preview performance may be performed at a lower rate than during other periods.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually confirm the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, In addition, during the execution of the movable body action effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the reach effect. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect performance images (images of ally characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the operating status of the first movable body 109SG401, so the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 changes as a movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether the motion is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion effect, and the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed, BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion performance is being executed. During the game, BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, so they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. To make it easier for a player to recognize that the performance sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Yes, the period T3 is a shorter period than the period T2 in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed, so the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion production is the same as the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion production. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the moving body motion is the same, and also to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance being longer than the execution period of the movable body motion production in the suggested reach performance. It is also possible to prevent the decline.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body movement performance or the failure notification performance, the movable body LED 109SG495 During the period in which the light is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body In motion production B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated, so it is difficult to determine whether the motion of the movable body is a motion suggesting a movable body motion or not. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between motions and motions.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, in the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1, and the movable body movement is produced. During execution, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1, so the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body movement performance is being executed. It is also possible to improve the game's interest during execution of the movable body movement performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, while the moving body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, the effect image of the reach effect is displayed. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body movement effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed V2 which is higher than the speed V1 on the image display device 5. Since the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion production A, and also to By moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, so that the production effect of the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced, which increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(F) and 10-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the performance to be executed from now on is a movable body movement performance or a failure notification performance.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , exemplifies a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the reach effect production image (images of the friendly character and enemy character) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance is set to a timing earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion production is performed. can increase the attention of players.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period and the display state of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be changed by displaying an image or an effect image. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, the feature section 109SG has a form that allows the image display device 5 to display an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays images according to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, which is executed as a reach performance. It may also be possible to display an effect image.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production, The size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance may be made different. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size that corresponds to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B that corresponds to the movement of the movable body and an effect image that corresponds to the progress of the battle production, the explosion effect that corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency may be made different between the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

Further, in the characteristic section 109SG, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion production and enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion production or failure notification production. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and the enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed. During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state that is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters. You may let them. Furthermore, when performing a movable body movement effect (when the variable display result is a jackpot), by changing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, which is even lower, The visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters may be further reduced. By doing this, after the enlarged display period ends, the visibility of the friendly characters and enemy characters on the image display device 5 decreases, so that the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended. When performing the movable body effect, it is possible to increase attention to the operations of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (the same ally character and enemy character), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, it is possible to A different effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the action effect. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is determined from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body movement suggestion effect. You can also increase the number. By doing this, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggesting effect is being executed, and therefore it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the movable body movement suggesting effect is being executed. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance, while the movable body motion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance. As the image corresponding to the body motion effect, an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an image compatible with a movable body motion suggestion performance or an image compatible with a movable body motion performance, the display period of the image compatible with a movable body motion suggestion performance and the display period of the image compatible with a movable body motion performance are set. It may be different. By doing this, the images corresponding to movable body motion suggestion performance and the images corresponding to movable body motion performance It becomes possible to display the display at an appropriate period corresponding to whether it is the execution of a movable body motion effect or the execution of a movable body motion effect.

Furthermore, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion effects on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image compatible with movable body motion effects may be reduced by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing this, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body motion performance rather than the image corresponding to the movable body motion performance.

Further, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion suggestion performance on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is output from the speaker 8L8R, and at the same time, the image display device 5 When displaying an image compatible with movable body movement effects in , the speaker 8L8R may output a sound corresponding to the movable body movement effects corresponding to the image compatible with movable body movement effects. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when performing the movable body motion suggestion production and when performing the movable body motion production. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is in progress.

Furthermore, when performing a movable body motion performance during the reach performance (when the variable display result becomes a jackpot), the movable body motion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion performance. Display of an image corresponding to body movement performance may be started. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the start of the movable body motion performance during the reach performance of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, in the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which the display is displayed moving at the speed V1 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as movable body motion suggestion production A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is set to the first movable body 109SG401. The speed V1 is changed to a low speed as the speed V1 approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion production A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing this, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (velocity V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG outputs 1 action suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation, and outputs 1 jackpot notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation. Although the form in which sound is output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation can be performed at any of the timings. It may be possible to output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound is started. By doing this, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also Since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, the game's interest can be improved.

In particular, when determining the output timing of the motion suggestion sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, when determining the output timing of the jackpot notification sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the embodiment is illustrated in which the first movable body 109SG401 is moved back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position, the present invention is not limited to this. , the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retreated position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retreated position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the retreat position until the movable body motion performance or the deviation notification performance is started. The present invention is not limited to this, but after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion performance or miss notification performance is started. Good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the execution of the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion production and the execution of the movable body motion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is made different between when the movable body motion suggestion production is executed and when the movable body motion production is executed. Good too.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the characteristic section 109SG also controls updating of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, and controls movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) based on control timers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable body In addition to the movement control, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1, the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In addition, when performing update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, movement control of the movable body, lighting control of the LED, and output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, the effect control image is updated every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (executes S73 to S77 of the production control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), updates the production image every 33 ms, controls the movement of the movable body every 1 ms, and controls the LED. The lighting control may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, motor 109SG422 for the third movable body, Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound can be suitably executed.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be changed depending on the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes are provided for the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S to be displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion production A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in any of the modes as the movable body motion suggestion production A. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled may be varied depending on the situation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature section 109SG displays the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion effect) during the third enlarged display period. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is also performed during the third enlarged display period. You may set up a case. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 can reciprocate between the retracted position and the suggested position during the third enlarged display period. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the display period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retreat position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution of movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B is suggested by repeatedly moving (movable body motion suggestion performance B), the present invention is not limited to this; Execution of the movable body movement effect A or the movable body movement effect B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of the image or the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the feature section 109SG, the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion is determined by lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may also suggest that performance B be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is used as a movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in a reduced state (see FIGS. 10-28(D) and 10-30(D)), the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before lowering the contrast between the image of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) The display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from the timing shown in FIG. 10-30(C).

Note that when starting to display the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a timing before lowering the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 in this way, By increasing the transparency of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect images being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the friendly character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-29(G), an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed; Although a part of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion becomes invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image may be displayed when the moving body movement effect is executed. It is also possible to display the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to movable body movement effects in the entire display area of the device 5, and make all other effect images invisible.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body motion performance is executed during the reach performance of Super Reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing to execute the movable body motion performance may be It may be performed at a timing other than during the reach performance of Super Reach. For example, as modification example 109SG-8, the combination of decorative patterns is as shown in FIGS. It may be possible to perform the movable body motion performance during the period from when the reach is reached until the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36(B), the moving body movement suggestion effect is started after reaching the reach position, and the image display device 5 displays the reach effect to be performed after this with high expectation level (jackpot). (for example, reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) and low expectation level (big hit game state) Which of the reach performances (for example, reach performances with lower expectations than the reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) As a branching effect that displays an image of a character with its eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether to branch to a branch, as shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37(C) to 10-37(E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character there opening its eyes. In other words, in this branching effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 may go dark without opening its eyes, so that a reach effect with high expectations will not be executed (a reach effect with low expectations will be executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), a low-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with high expectations, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37(F) to 10-37(H). By opening the eyes of the character who is playing the game, it is announced that a highly anticipated reach effect will be executed. Moreover, at this time, a movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion performance and the branch performance are completed, a highly anticipated reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body motion performance may be executed as a performance to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as exemplified in the feature section 109SG, but it may also be performed as a performance to notify that a highly expected reach performance will be executed. It may be performed as a performance (a performance that notifies that the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(B) and 10-37(C), the character with its eyes closed is gradually enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character whose eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect, the image display device 5 At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the feature section 109SG, the present invention is applied as a branch for determining whether or not the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the reach effect of Super Reach, but in this modification example 109SG-8. As shown, the present invention may be applied to determine which of the low-expected ready-to-reach effects and high-expected ready-to-reach effects are executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is an image of the character (the first specific image is an image of the character with its eyes closed, the second specific image is an image of the character with its eyes open), the effect image in the present invention corresponds to the above-mentioned image of concentrated lines, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in this modification example 109SG-8, when performing the movable body movement performance as a performance to notify that a reach performance with high expectations will be executed, Although a form in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed before the execution of the movable body motion performance is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion performance may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion performance may be different between when the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body motion suggestion performance is not performed (the rate at which the highly expected ready-to-reach performance is executed is different).

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a gaming machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a production image;
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). As shown, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion production B. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5, the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms),
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, portions where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. (portion where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the 2 enlarged display periods),
moreover,
A special effect that displays a special character (for example, ally character B-3/in the examples, the special character is expressed as a specific character, but they have the same meaning) on the display means to give a suggestion regarding the advantageous state. (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control/Note that in the examples, special effects are expressed as specific effects, but they have the same meaning),
The performance execution means includes, as the special performance,
a first special effect (for example, reach effect of super reach β) that displays the special character in a first mode (for example, ally character B-3 whose head and body do not change);
The special character is displayed in a second mode that is different from the first mode and in which the display ratio of special components of the special character is higher than that of the first mode (for example, the head and body are changed from ally character B-3 to A second special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-2) displayed on the lowered ally character B-2);
The special character is displayed in a third mode that is different from the first mode and the second mode and in which the display ratio of the special component is higher than the first mode (for example, when the ally character B-3 is displayed as an ally) A third special effect (for example, a reserved display preview effect or an active display preview effect of display pattern β) displayed by an ally character B-1 whose head and body are lower than character B-2;
is executable,
The first aspect is better than the third aspect because the difference in the display ratio of the special component with the second aspect is smaller than the difference in the display ratio of the special component with the third aspect. is also similar to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19(B), the difference in head and body between ally character B-3 and ally character B-2 is about 1 head, Since the head and body difference between character B-3 and ally character B-1 is approximately 1.5 head and body, the head and body difference is approximately 0.5 head and height higher than that of ally character B-1. parts that are similar characters),
The ratio at which the first special performance is performed after the third special performance is performed is different from the ratio at which the first special performance is performed after the second special performance is performed (for example, in FIG. As shown in Figure 22, the rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the suspended display notice effect is executed in display pattern β is the same as the rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2. The percentage of execution of reach effects is higher than that of gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Furthermore, depending on whether the special character is displayed in the second mode or the third mode, the rate at which the special character is subsequently displayed in the first mode, which has the lowest display rate, changes. It is possible to draw attention to whether the special character is displayed in either of the two modes or the third mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to improve the game's interest by making the effect images more conspicuous, and also when the special character is displayed in the second mode and the third mode, and then when the special character is displayed in the first mode. Since the rate at which the first special effect is executed changes, the player can expect the first special effect to be executed while also being asked whether the special character is displayed in the second or third mode. This will increase your interest in playing games. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, easily attracts players' interest and improves the interest of the performance.

Further, the movement of the movable body and special effects may be associated with each other. For example, even if the movable body is repeatedly moving, a special effect may be performed. By doing so, the movable body and the special effects are executed, thereby increasing the expectation of a jackpot and improving the interest.

Furthermore, in a variation in which the probability of performing a specific performance or effect performance is high, the probability of execution of the special performance may be similarly increased. By doing so, various performances such as specific performances, effect performances, special performances, etc. are executed, and the entertainment is improved.

Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot may be increased by enlarging and changing the special effect in the same way as the specific image. By doing so, the level of expectation of a jackpot changes as various images change, thereby increasing interest.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko machine according to feature part 010AK) A gaming machine 1),
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
Erase effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, A production control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, missing a variable pattern command or an error in the erasure effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, It is also possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step 010AKS045).
Examples include gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S909). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, it is determined by, for example, a parity bit or a checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 043SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-27.

First, FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIG. 12-1, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 043SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 043SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. Furthermore, in the game machine frame 043SG003, a glass door frame 043SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the game machine frame 043SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 043SG003a, and when the glass door frame 043SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 043SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown), and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 043SG003 and the glass. Door frame 043SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 043SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is hit relatively weakly (hit to the left) by the operation of the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 043SG002R is a game area where the game ball is thrown downward by the operation of the ball-hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 043SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the general winning hole 10 is arranged in the left gaming area 043SG002L, and in the right gaming area 043SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 043SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 043SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 043SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 043SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 043SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 043SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

A first pending storage display area 043SG005D and a second pending storage display area 043SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 043SG005D and the second pending memory display area 043SG005U, a pending memory display is performed that specifiably displays the number of pending memories (special figure pending memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game.

Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game means that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) occurs based on the starting winnings. In other words, the starting conditions (also referred to as "execution conditions") for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols have been met, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is currently being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done. In the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the starting prize when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole is displayed in round white color, and the second starting winning hole is displayed as a round white display. Similarly, the reserved memory display generated based on the starting winning due to the ball passing (entering) is shown as a round white display.

In the following explanation, the first pending memory display area 043SG005D and the second pending memory display area 043SG005U may be referred to as pending display areas, and the number of pending memories is the same as the first pending memory display area 043SG005D and the second pending memory display area 043SG005D. This can be recognized by the number of pending storage displays displayed in area 043SG005U. Furthermore, a display that is a collection of these pending storage displays is sometimes referred to as a pending display.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the main board 11 in the feature part 043SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 043SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member in a pachinko game machine. It is mounted on the back of 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2, a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area) has a A first special symbol display device 043SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 043SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories. 043SG025A, a second reservation display 043SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 043SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 043SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 043SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jacket type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 043SG002R such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 043SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 043SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 043SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 043SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 043SG004A and the second special symbol display device 043SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 043SG004A and the second special symbol display device 043SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 043SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 043SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the first special symbol display device 043SG004A and the second special symbol display device 043SG004B are all different, but in the first special symbol display device 043SG004A. The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 043SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 043SG025A and the second hold indicator 043SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 043SG025A and second hold display 043SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the second from the left LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment In section 043SG, the lights go out toward the left).

In addition, in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. For this reason, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 043SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory is lit) When the left two LEDs of display 043SG25B are lit), after the second special figure reservation memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 043SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments constituting the round display 043SG131 differs depending on these jackpot types.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

In addition, the effect control board 12 in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 043SG321 and a second movable body 043SG322 that can operate between the respective origin positions and the effect position during variable display etc. An origin detection sensor 043SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 043SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 043SG321, and a second movable body 043SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 043SG322. An origin detection sensor 043SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 12-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 043SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 12-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 043SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 043SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 12-3 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 043SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 043SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. be.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data read operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-4, in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 12-4, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 043SG of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is performed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, three or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-5(A), regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment is executed, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, It is set shorter than Super Reach β. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which super reach reach effects such as super reach α and super reach β in the feature part 043SG of this embodiment are executed, the time for super reach β is higher than that of super reach α. is set for a long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display result is set to increase in the order of super reach β and super reach α, and the jackpot expectation level becomes “jackpot”, and in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the variation The longer the time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), the reach effect in the variable display of super reach α is a battle effect in which an ally character A-3 (see FIG. 12-19) and an enemy character fight, which will be described later. The reach performance in the variable display of super reach β is a battle performance in which an ally character B-3 (see FIG. 12-19) and an enemy character fight, which will be described later. That is, when ally character B-3 appears as a reach effect of super reach, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when ally character A-3 appears.

In addition, in the characteristic section 043SG of this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into different types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the variation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 12-6 to 12-10, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (for normal state/time saving state) shown in FIG. 12-6(A) and the first special figure shown in FIG. 12-6(B). display result determination table for the second special symbol (for the normal state/time saving state) shown in Figure 12-6(C) and the second special symbol shown in Figure 12-6(D). Graphical display result determination table (for variable probability state), jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 12-7(A) (for first special symbol), jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 12-7(B) (second special In addition to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, the regular pattern display result determination table (not shown), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. ing.

FIGS. 12-6(A) to 12-(D) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 12-6 (A) is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state) This is a display result determination table for the first special figure (for normal state/time saving state). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

FIG. 12-6(B) shows the first special pattern display result determination table ( (for definite variable states). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 12-6 (C) is selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state) This is a second special figure display result determination table (for normal state/time saving state). In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

FIG. 12-6 (D) shows the second special pattern display result determination table ( (for definite variable states). In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

In this way, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure display of "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. assigned to the result. As a result, in the probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled in the normal state or the time saving state (in this embodiment) In the feature section 043SG of this embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and controlling the jackpot game state is higher than that of 1/300 (in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment, the probability is 1/200). ). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the variable probability state, the probability that the control will be set to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. , a determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state. A value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in Figures 12-6(A) and 12-6(B), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set to "small" regardless of the gaming state. The probability of controlling the game to a small win game state as "win" is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 12-6 (C) and 12-6 (D), in each second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display results are determined as "small hit" regardless of the gaming state. ”, the probability of determining that the small winning gaming state will be controlled is set to 1/100.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the gaming state at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (Jackpot A to Jackpot C). ). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 12-6 indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 043SG004A or the second special symbol display device 043SG004B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 043SG004A or the second special symbol display device 043SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

FIGS. 12-7(A) and 12-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 12-7 (A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 12-7(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12-8. In the feature section 043SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the transition to a low-probability high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, a form is illustrated in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 12-7 (A), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In other words, in the feature section 043SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning hole in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. , the jackpot type is determined based on a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-9(A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 200 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1 -1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Assigned.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, from 0 to 997 is the small hit fluctuation pattern ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small winning variation pattern in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more small winning variation patterns are provided. A variation pattern may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base gaming state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D, which is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), in the variation pattern judgment table A for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 1 or less), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 450 out of the range of 1 to 997. 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where the normal reach is off, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern where the super reach α is off (PA1-1). It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), in the variation pattern judgment table B for failure (for low base medium total pending storage number of 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 997 in the range of 1 to 997. 500 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α deviation. 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in Figure 12-10(C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 5 or more), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 550 out of the range of 1 to 997. 551 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), 701 to 900 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α variation patterns. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, the variation pattern for shortening non-reach failure (PA1-4), the variation pattern for normal reach failure (PA2-1), and the fluctuation pattern for super reach α failure, which correspond to the time saving control. (PA2-2) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in Figure 12-10(D), in the variation pattern judgment table D for miss (high base medium), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 550 are non-reach variation. The range from 551 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where normal reach is off, and the range from 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach α is off (PA2-2). 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the losing variation pattern determination tables A to D, the ratio of determining non-reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns is set higher than the ratio of determining super reach variation patterns. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach α, and 901 to 997 is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach β. In other words, if the variable display result assigned to each variation pattern is a failure, the Super Reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display based on the Super Reach variation pattern is not executed. This can prevent the effectiveness from decreasing.

Note that although the feature section 043SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a failure, the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not the same, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or the percentage of variation between non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination ratios may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 12-5). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 043SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-10(A) to 12-10(D), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, the feature section 043SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to execute. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, variable display results, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 12-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 043SG004A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 043SG004B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The common figure reservation storage section stores the pending information of the common figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 043SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 043SG190043SG190 as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the performance control data holding area 043SG190 includes a performance control flag setting section 043SG191, a performance control timer setting section 043SG192, a performance control counter setting section 043SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section. 043SG194043SG194.

The production control flag setting section 043SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 043SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 043SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 043SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 043SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 043SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 043SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 043SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 043SG194A is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 043SG194. As shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the starting winning command buffer 043SG194A has a storage area (buffer number There are provided an area corresponding to "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 043SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of pending memories of the second special figure pending memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) or pending storage number notification command ( A set of commands such as a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command) and a variation category designation command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer 043SG194A at the time of start winning are stored according to these commands and the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display. Storage areas (entries) are secured to store the reservation display flags to which the flag values are set in association with each other and to store them separately in a first special symbol reservation memory and a second special symbol reservation memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. They are shifted one by one to the upper position.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 043SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered in the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 043SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when a command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the suffix "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. I'm going to go there.

Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the CPU 103 in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment. FIG. 12-12 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning a prize determination process, as shown in FIG. 12-12, the CPU 103 first responds to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether the first starting port switch 22A is on (Step 043SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (step 043SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 043SGS502). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit (step 043SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 043SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 043SGS501a (step 043SGS501a; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value at step 043SGS502 (step 043SGS502; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step 043SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (step 043SGS501b; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 043SGS505). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 043SGS505 (step 043SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 043SGS506).

In addition, if the second starting port switch is not on (step 043SGS501b; N) or if the second special symbol pending storage number is the upper limit value (step 043SGS505; Y), the starting winning determination process is ended.

After executing either of the processes of step 043SGS503 and step 043SGS506, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 043SGS507). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 043SGS508). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 043SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 043SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 043SGS510). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage section.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 043SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 043SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 043SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of step 043SGS511, winning random value determination process is executed (step 043SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for (Step 043 SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of step 043SGS513, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 043SGS514). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 043SGS514; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 043SGS515), and then the process of step 043SGS501b is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 043SGS514; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 043SGS516), and then the starting winning prize is The determination process ends. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 12-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 043SGS512 of FIG. 12-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 043SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display is performed according to the gaming state, the special symbol to be variable displayed, and the set value. Select a result determination table (see Figure 12-6) and use the selected display result determination table to control the special pattern display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" game state as a "jackpot" A determination is made as to whether or not the special figure display result should be treated as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 043SGS512. By this, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol display, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. I do. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to win a jackpot or a small win. Before starting the game, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a “big hit” or “small hit” and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 or the like starts to execute a pre-read preview performance such as a pending display preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section, etc., and determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step 043SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is on, and that the state is in a time saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It is sufficient to specify that the state is a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of step 043SGS521, the CPU 103 selects and sets a display result determination table according to the current gaming state, starting opening buffer value, and set value (step 043SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special symbol (normal state/ If the starting port buffer value is "1" and the gaming state is a variable probability state, the display result determination table for the first special symbol (for a variable probability state) shown in Figure 12-6 (B) is set. ). In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" and the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the display result determination table for the second special symbol (for the normal state/time-saving state) shown in Figure 12-6(C). ), and if the starting opening buffer value is "2" and the gaming state is variable probability state, set the display result judgment table for the second special symbol (for variable probability state) shown in Figure 12-6 (D). do.

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (step 043SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In addition, the variable display result determination module compares the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the set variable display result determination table with the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and determines the random number. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value of the random numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is outside the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be a loss.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined in step 043SGS525 that the variable display result is a jackpot (step 043SGS526). If it is determined that there is no jackpot (step 043SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result was determined to be a small hit in step 043SGS525 (step 043SGS527). If it is determined that there will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined that it will be a loss in the variable display (step 043SGS527; N), it is determined whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, the current gaming state is the time saving state. It is determined whether or not (Step 043SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not on (step 043SGS528; N), select and set the error variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 12-10 and proceed to step 043SGS536 (step 043SGS529); if the time saving flag is on (Step 043SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 12-10(D), and proceeds to Step 043SGS536 (Step 043SGS530).

If it is determined in step 043SGS526 that the variable display is a jackpot (step 043SGS526; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(A) is selected and set (step 043SGS535), and step Proceed to 043SGS536. In addition, if it is determined in step 043SGS527 that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 043SGS527; Y), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 12-9 (B) (step 043SGS527; Y). 043SGS532), proceed to step 043SGS536.

In addition, in this feature section 043SG, in these fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, a determination value of 1 to 700 is commonly assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. The super reach α variation pattern is assigned to 701 to 900, and the super reach β variation pattern is assigned to 901 to 997.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a loss, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the judgment of non-reach and super reach can be made according to the judgment. Even if the number of retained memories changes later, the fluctuation pattern will always be non-reach or super reach, so when determining the starting prize, use the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to determine the fluctuation pattern. It is designed to judge. Furthermore, regarding the determination of super reach α and super reach β, even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, the determined variation pattern of super reach is selected.

After executing any of the processes in step 043SGS529, step 043SGS530, step 043SGS532, and step 043SGS535, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 043SGS536). In this characteristic part 043SG, as shown in FIG. 12-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", there is a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "non-reach" and a variable category of "normal reach". A variable category that becomes a display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "Super Reach α" regardless of the total number of pending memories, and a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "Super Reach β" regardless of the total number of pending memories. and are provided. Furthermore, this feature section 03SG also provides a variable category in which the variable display result is a "small win." In step 043SGS536, it is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 043SGS536 to the production control board 12 (step 043SGS537), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Note that the symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, the processing executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the feature section 043SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 043SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 043SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 043SGS221 (step 043SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 043 SGS222). When it is the first starting slot winning designation command (step 043SGS222; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 043SGS223). For example, in the process of step 043SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 043SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 043SGS222 (step 043SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 043SGS224). When it is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 043SGS224; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 043SGS225). For example, in the process of step 043SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting slot winning designation command at step 043SGS224 (step 043SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 043SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 043SGS227 (step 043SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 043SGS228). If it is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 043SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 043SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 043SGS228 (step 043SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 043SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (Step 043SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 043SGS231). .

If the received command is a variable category command in step 043SGS227 (step 043SGS227; Y), or after executing any of the processes in step 043SGS223, step 043SGS225, step 043SG229, or step 043SG231, the received command will be received at the time of start winning. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the command buffer 043SG194A (step 043SGS233), and the process returns to step 043SGS221.

In addition, if a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a fluctuation start command (first fluctuation start command or second fluctuation start command), The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the production control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 043SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 043SGS230 (step 043SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 043SGS234), and then the process returns to step 043SGS221.

FIG. 12-15 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing (S76) in this feature section 943SG. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process after executing the pre-read notice setting process (step 043SGS162). In the pending display update process, for example, as the starting opening winning designation command stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 043SG194A, the command "B100 (H)" indicating the first starting winning opening is added to the stored number. Based on this, the number of pending memories (first special figure pending memory number) corresponding to the first starting winning is specified, and whether it matches the displayed number of pending memories in the first pending memory display area 043SG005D at that time, In other words, it is determined whether there is a change (increase or decrease) in the number of pending memories. If they do not match in this judgment (if there is a change in the number of pending memories), the display buffer data for displaying the first pending memory display area 043SG005D is transferred to the start winning reception command buffer 043SG194A at that point. By overwriting and updating the display data of the display mode specified from the reservation display flag stored in each entry of the first special figure reservation storage, the display of the first reservation storage display area 043SG005D is updated.

In addition, based on the number of stored commands of "B200 (H)" indicating the second starting winning opening as the starting opening winning designation command stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 043SG194A, the second starting winning a prize is determined. Identify the number of pending memories (second special figure pending memory number) corresponding to , and determine whether it matches the displayed number of pending memories in the second pending memory display area 043SG005U at that point, that is, the number of pending memories changes. (increase or decrease). If they do not match in this judgment (if there is a change in the number of pending memories), the display buffer data for displaying the second pending memory display area 043SG005U is transferred to the starting winning reception command buffer 043SG194A at that point. By overwriting and updating the display data of the display mode specified from the reservation display flag stored in each entry of the second special figure reservation storage, the display of the second reservation storage display area 043SG005U is updated.

FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) shown in FIG. 12-15. In the prefetch notice setting process, the production control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 043SG194A (step 043SGS241), and determines whether the entry in which the starting winning designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command is stored is It is determined whether there is one (Step 043SGS242). If there are no entries storing these commands (Step 043SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there are entries storing these commands (Step 043SGS242; Y), these commands are It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose pending flag is not set among the stored entries (step 043 SGS243). If there is no entry in which the pending flag is not set among the entries in which these commands are stored (the pending flag is set in all entries) (step 043SGS243; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends. .

In addition, if there is an entry in which the suspension flag is not set among the entries in which these commands are stored (Step 043SGS243; Y), it is further determined whether or not the suspension display preview effect is already being executed ( Step 043SGS243a). In addition, whether or not the pending display notice performance is already being executed can be determined by the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" and the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" of the reception command buffer 043SG194A at the time of start winning. The determination may be made based on whether the hold display flag of any of the entries "4" is set to "1" or "2".

If the pending display notice effect is already being executed (step 043SGS243a; Y), proceed to step 043SGS248, and if the pending display notice effect is not being executed (step 043SGS243a; N), proceed from the fluctuation category specification command of the entry. Identify the variation category (043SGS244). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview performance as a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern based on the specified fluctuation category (Step 043SGS245).

In addition, the hold display preview effect in this feature section 043SG is to display the hold display in a display mode according to the hold flag, so that the super reach α and super reach β are displayed in a variable display based on the hold display. This is a performance that suggests that a reach performance will be executed.

In step 043SGS245, as shown in FIG. 12-16(B), if the specified fluctuation category is non-reach or small hit, the performance control CPU 120 determines to non-execute the pending display notice performance at a rate of 100%. do. Note that deciding not to execute the pending display preview performance refers to displaying the pending display in the round white display described above.

If the specified fluctuation category is normal reach, 90% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, 10% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α, and 0 %, it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern β.

If the specified fluctuation category is super reach α, it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 35%, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α at a rate of 50%. , it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern β at a rate of 15%. If the specified fluctuation category is super reach β, it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 35%, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α at a rate of 15%. , it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern β at a rate of 50%.

Note that executing the pending display preview performance in display pattern α means displaying the pending display on ally character A-1, which will be described later, and executing the pending display preview performance in display pattern β refers to displaying the pending display in the display pattern β. This refers to displaying a hold display on ally character B-1, which will be described later.

In other words, in this feature section 043SG, when the hold display preview performance is executed in display pattern α or display pattern β, the hold display is handled at a higher rate than when the hold display preview performance is not executed. When the reach effect of super reach is executed with variable display, that is, when the hold display preview effect is executed in display pattern α or display pattern β, the ratio is higher than when the hold display preview effect is not executed. It is set so that the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern α, super reach is achieved in the variable display corresponding to the pending display at a higher rate than when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern β. The reach effect of α is set to be executed. In addition, when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern β, the variable display corresponding to the pending display has a higher rate of super reach than when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern α. The reach effect of β is set to be executed.

After executing step 043SGS245, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance at step 043SGS245 (step 043SGS246). If it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance (step 043SGS246; Y), the pending display flag of the entry is set to a value corresponding to the determined display pattern (for example, the pending display preview performance is executed in the display pattern α). If it has been decided to perform the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β, set it to "1", and if it has been decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β, set it to "2"), and end the pre-read notice setting process ( In step 043SGS247), if it is determined not to execute the pending display preview exercise (step 043SGS246; N), the process proceeds to step 043SGS248.

In step 043SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value (for example, "0") corresponding to non-execution of the pending display notice performance in the pending display flag of the entry, and ends the prefetch notice setting process (step 043SGS248 ).

FIG. 12-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 043SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 043SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer 043SG194A at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not on in step 043SGS271 (step 043SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 043SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not on (step 043SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is on (step 043SGS273; ;Y), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 043SG194A are stored in the buffer number It is shifted upward one by one (step 043SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

After executing step 043SGS272 or step 043SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 043SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern that can be specified from the variation pattern specification command. (Step 043SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 043SG of this embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern with an even number of three symbols is used as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, for example, a decorative pattern with three symbols arranged in odd numbers other than "7" or "3" as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged as "7" or "3" as the stop symbol (jackpot Decide on the pattern). In addition, if the received display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command indicating a small win, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", three consecutive even numbers (or odd numbers), etc. ) and other decorative patterns (small winning patterns) are determined. Additionally, if the display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a miss, if the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a symbol combination such as "767" or "232" that is a miss is determined. , if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative symbols such as "356" and "928" (non-reach symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. It is only necessary to decide the stop pattern of the decorative pattern. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 043SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 performs a cut-in performance determination process for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach. (Step 043SGS277) is executed and the process proceeds to Step 043SGS280.

Then, in step 043SGS280, the production control CPU 120 selects a production control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern specification command (step 043SGS280), and starts a process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 043SGS281). ).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 043SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 043SG in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 Alternatively, the variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 043SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 043SGS284). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 043SGS285).

FIG. 12-18(A) is a flowchart showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-17. In the cut-in performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies a fluctuation pattern (step 043SGS301), and determines whether the identified fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern (step 043SGS302). . If the identified variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a small hit variation pattern (Step 043SGS302; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is ended, and if the identified variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (Step 043SGS302; N). further determines whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 043SGS303). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined based on whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on.

If the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 043SGS303; Y), the value of the pending display flag stored in each entry of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 043SG194A is Specify and proceed to step 043SGS306 (step 043SGS304), and if the variable display is the variable display of the second special figure (step 043SGS303; N), each of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 043SG194A The value of the pending display flag stored in the entry is specified and the process proceeds to step 043SGS306 (step 043SGS305).

In step 043SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which the value of the pending display flag is set to 1 or 2, that is, whether or not the pending display preview performance has already been executed (step 043SGS306 ). If there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is set to 1 or 2 (step 043SGS306; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and the entry for which the value of the pending display flag is set to 1 or 2 is If there is no cut-in effect (step 043SGS306; N), whether or not to perform a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the variation pattern specified in step 043SGS301 (step 043SGS307).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 12-18 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the pattern CI of the cut-in effect is determined. -1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution at cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 0%. Additionally, if the variation pattern is a super reach α variation pattern, non-execution of cut-in effects is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of cut-in effects with pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 70%. , the execution of cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach β, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the execution of cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 70%.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 12-18(C), pattern CI-1 is a production pattern for displaying a cut-in image of ally character A-2 (see FIG. 12-19) on the image display device 5, and the pattern CI-2 is an effect that displays a cut-in image of ally character B-2 (see FIG. 12-19) on the image display device 5.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12-18(B) and 12-18(C), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-1 (the cut-in image of the ally character A-2 is displayed on the image display device 5). If the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2 (the cut-in image of ally character B-2 is displayed on the image display device 5), the reach of super reach α will be higher When the effect is executed and the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2 (the cut-in image of ally character B-2 is displayed on the image display device 5), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-1. The reach effect of the super reach β is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the cut-in image of the ally character A-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

After executing step 043SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the cut-in effect (step 043SGS308). If it is decided not to perform the cut-in effect (Step 043SGS308; N), the cut-in effect determination process is ended, and if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect (Step 043SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is memorized. At the same time, a cut-in effect start wait timer is set, and the cut-in effect determination process is ended (step 043SGS309, step 043SGS310).

Incidentally, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 120 first increments the value of the cut-in effect start wait timer by 1 each time the variable display effect process is executed. When the cut-in performance start wait timer times out, a process table for cut-in performance corresponding to the performance pattern of the cut-in performance is selected, and the process timer for cut-in performance is started. From then on, the effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer for cut-in effect by 1 every time the effect process is executed during variable display, and performs the effect according to the content of the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer for cut-in effect. All you have to do is control the device.

Next, ally characters A-1 to ally characters A-3 and ally characters B-1 to ally characters B-3 in this feature section 043SG will be described based on FIG. 12-19.

As shown in FIGS. 12-19(A) and 12-19(C), ally character A-1 and ally character A-2 are characters with a lower head and body based on ally character A-3. , each has a different head and body. Specifically, the ally character A-1 displayed as the display pattern α of the pending display preview effect has a height of about 1.5 cm, and the ally character A-2 displayed as a cut-in effect of the pattern CI-1 has a height of about 3 cm. The ally character A-3 (the character on which the ally characters A-1 and ally characters A-2 are based) displayed during the reach effect of Super Reach α is a four-headed character.

Among these ally character A-1, ally character A-2, and ally character A-3, ally character A-1 is the character whose display mode is most abstracted (deformed) (high degree of abstraction), It can be said that ally character A-3 is the character whose display mode is least abstracted (level of abstraction; low) (level of abstraction in ally character A-1, ally character A-2, and ally character A-3; Ally character A-1 > Ally character A-2 > Ally character A-3). Note that abstraction in the present invention refers to increasing the proportion of elements that can identify characters and decreasing the proportion of other elements.

In other words, the reach performance of Super Reach α is a performance that displays ally character A-3 without changing its head and body, and the cut-in performance of pattern CI-1 displays ally character A-3 with its head and body. This is an effect in which ally character A-3 is displayed as ally character A-2 with a lower head display (increased display ratio of the head of ally character A-3). This is an effect in which the character is displayed as an ally character A-1 whose head and body are lower than that of A-2 (the proportion of the head displayed in the ally character A-2 is further increased).

In other words, in the present invention, a high display ratio of a character's head is synonymous with a high degree of abstraction, and a low display ratio of a character's head means a high degree of abstraction. It is synonymous with having a low degree.

Among these ally characters A-1, ally characters A-2, and ally characters A-3, if ally character A-2 is used as a reference, the head and body difference between ally characters A-1 and ally characters A-2 is approximately 1.5. The difference in head and body between ally character A-2 and ally character A-3 is approximately one head and body. In other words, the ally character A-3 in this feature section 043SG has a head and body difference between ally character A-2 and ally character A-2 of about 1 head and length, and a difference between ally character A-1 and ally character A-1 of about 1.5 heads. , it can be said that the character is more similar to the ally character A-2 in terms of head and body difference by about 0.5 head than the ally character A-1.

As shown in FIGS. 12-19(B) and 12-19(C), ally character B-1, ally character B-2, and ally character B-3 are all ally character A-1 and ally character A. -2, ally character A-3 is different from the same character as the motif, but each has a different head and body. Specifically, ally character B-1 displayed as display pattern β of the pending display preview effect has a head size of approximately 1.5 cm, and ally character B-2 displayed as a cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 has a height of approximately 3 cm. The ally character B-3 displayed during the reach effect of Super Reach β is a four-headed character.

In other words, among ally character B-1, ally character B-2, and ally character B-3, ally character B-1 is the character whose display mode is most abstracted (deformed) (high abstraction level). Yes, it can be said that ally character B-3 is the character whose display mode is least abstracted (level of abstraction; low) (abstraction in ally character B-1, ally character B-2, and ally character B-3). degree; ally character B-1 > ally character B-2 > ally character B-3).

In other words, the reach performance of Super Reach α is a performance that displays ally character A-3 without changing its head and body, and the cut-in performance of pattern CI-1 displays ally character A-3 with its head and body. This is an effect in which ally character A-3 is displayed as ally character A-2 with a lower head display (increased display ratio of the head of ally character A-3). This is an effect in which the character is displayed as an ally character A-1 whose head and body are lower than that of A-2 (the proportion of the head displayed in the ally character A-2 is further increased).

Among these ally characters B-1, ally characters B-2, and ally characters B-3, if ally character B-2 is used as a reference, the head and body difference between ally characters B-1 and ally characters B-2 is approximately 1.5. The difference in head and body between ally character B-2 and ally character B-3 is approximately one head and body. In other words, the ally character B-3 in this feature section 043SG has a head and body difference with ally character B-2 of about 1 head and a height difference of about 1.5 heads with ally character B-1. , it can be said that this character is more similar to the ally character B-2 in terms of head and body difference by about 0.5 head than the ally character B-1.

As shown in FIG. 12-20, to explain the execution period of each effect in this feature section 043SG, cut-in effects are effects that can be executed during the period from the start of variable display to reach. It is. Further, the pending display preview performance is a performance that can be executed during a period from an arbitrary timing during the variable display (timing when a starting prize occurs) to the target variable display start timing. Moreover, the reach effect of super reach is an effect executed during the period from reach to end of the variable display.

For this reason, as shown in Figures 12-21 (A) and 12-21 (B), the cut-in performance and the super reach reach performance are performances that do not overlap in execution period, while the hold display notice performance and the cut-in performance do not overlap. The in performance, the hold display preview performance, and the super reach performance are performances that may have overlapping execution periods.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-22 (A), 12-16 (B), and 12-18 (B), the ratio at which ally character A-3 is displayed after ally character A-1 is displayed is If Pa1 is the rate at which ally character A-3 is displayed after ally character A-2 is displayed, then in this feature section 043SG, the rate at which ally character A-3 is displayed after ally character A-1 is displayed is Pa2. The display ratio is set higher than the ratio at which ally character A-3 is displayed after ally character A-2 is displayed (Pa1>Pa2). In other words, in this feature section 043SG, depending on whether ally character A-3 is displayed as ally character A-1 or ally character A-2, which has a short head and body, ally character A-3 is displayed as reach effect of super reach α. Since the rate at which -3 is displayed changes, the player can decide whether ally character A-3 is displayed as ally character A-1 or ally character A-2 before the reach effect of super reach α. It is possible to draw attention to

Also, as shown in Figures 12-22(B), 12-16(B), and 12-18(B), the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-1 is displayed Assuming that Pb1 is the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-2 is displayed, and Pb2 is the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-2 is displayed, in this feature section 043SG, the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-1 is displayed is Pb2. The display ratio is set higher than the ratio at which ally character B-3 is displayed after ally character B-2 is displayed (Pb1>Pb2). In other words, in this feature section 043SG, depending on whether ally character B-3 is displayed as ally character B-1 or ally character B-2, which has a short head and body, ally character B-3 is displayed as the reach effect of super reach β. Since the rate at which -3 is displayed changes, the player can decide whether ally character B-3 is displayed as ally character B-1 or ally character B-2 before the reach effect of super reach β. It is possible to draw attention to

Next, the display modes of the hold display preview effect, cut-in effect, and ready-to-reach effect on the image display device 5 in the feature section 043SG will be described based on FIGS. 12-23 to 12-26. First, as shown in Figures 12-23 (A) to 12-23 (C), when a variable display is executed in a state where a pending display notice effect is not executed, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is normal reach. , super reach α, or super reach β, a cut-in effect may be executed in pattern CI-1. In this case, after the end of the cut-in performance, the reach performance of super reach α is executed at a higher rate than the reach performance of normal reach and super reach β.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-24 (A) to 12-24 (D), a starting winning occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting winning, a pending display preview effect is executed in the display pattern α. In this case, in the variable display subject to the pending display preview performance, the super reach α reach performance is executed at a higher rate than the normal reach and super reach β field reach performances.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-25 (A) to 12-25 (C), when a variable display is executed in a state where the pending display preview effect is not executed, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is super If it is a variable pattern of reach α or super reach β, a cut-in effect may be executed in pattern CI-2. In this case, after the end of the cut-in performance, the reach performance of super reach β is executed at a higher rate than the reach performance of normal reach and super reach α.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-26(A) to 12-26(D), a starting winning occurs during the variable display, and a pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern β based on the starting winning. In this case, in the variable display subject to the pending display preview performance, the super reach α reach performance is executed at a higher rate than the normal reach and super reach β field reach performances.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 043SG, the performance control CPU 120 performs the reach performance of super reach β as the performance to display the ally character B-3, and the ally character whose head and body are lower than the ally character B-3. A cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 is used as an effect to display B-2, and a suspended display preview effect of display pattern β is used as an effect to display ally character B-1 whose head and body are lower than ally character B-2. It is possible to perform The rate at which reach effects are executed is different. Therefore, in this feature section 043SG, depending on whether the ally character B-3 can be displayed as either the short ally character B-2 or the even shorter ally character B-3, The proportion at which the tall ally character B-3 is displayed changes, that is, when the suspended display preview effect of display pattern β is executed and when the cut-in effect is executed using pattern CI-2, Since the rate at which the reach effect of super reach β is executed later changes, to draw the player's attention to whether ally character B-3 is displayed as ally character B-1 or ally character B-2. This allows the player to enjoy the game more. Furthermore, this feature section 043SG provides two types of ally characters to be displayed as a pending display preview performance, cut-in performance, and super reach performance, and determines which ally character will be displayed in the pending display preview performance or cut-in performance. Since the ready-to-win performances that are suggested to be executed are different depending on the player, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the types of ally characters displayed as these pending display preview performances and cut-in performances, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, in this characteristic part 043SG, as shown in FIG. 12-22(B), the rate at which the reach effect of super reach β is executed after the pending display preview effect of display pattern β is executed is the pattern CI-2. Since the ratio is set higher than the rate at which the reach effect of super reach β is executed after the cut-in effect is executed, when the suspended display preview effect of display pattern β is executed, the cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 is set higher. Since the player's expectations for the execution of the super reach β reach performance can be raised more than when the in performance is executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-20 and 12-21, the cut-in performance and the pending display preview performance may have overlapping execution periods depending on the timing of the starting winnings, but the cut-in performance and the super The execution period of the Reach β reach effect does not overlap.In other words, the execution period of the cut-in effect and the execution period of the pending display notice effect may overlap at least in part, but the execution period of the cut-in effect does not overlap. and does not overlap with the execution period of the super reach β reach effect. Therefore, in this feature section 043SG, the displayed ally character (ally character B-3) determines whether the cut-in effect is more closely related to the pending display preview effect or the super reach β reach effect. Players can be made aware not only by the difference in head and body, but also by the situation of overlap, so whether the cut-in effect is executed in duplicate with the pending display notice effect and the reach effect of Super Reach β. This can attract the attention of the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 043SG, the reach effect of super reach β is the first specific effect in the present invention, the cut-in effect is the second specific effect in the present invention, and the hold display notice effect is the third specific effect in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first specific effects, second specific effects, and third specific effects include the super reach β reach effect, cut-in effect, and hold display notice. It may be applied to performances other than performances. In addition, when doing so, the ratio at which at least a part of the first specific performance and the second specific performance are executed overlaps is such that at least a part of the second specific performance and the third specific performance overlap. The first specific effect and the second specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than the rate at which the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed, and furthermore, at a rate lower than the rate at which at least a portion of the second specific effect and the second specific effect are executed overlappingly. At least a portion of the above may be executed overlappingly.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the above embodiment, the third specific performance of the present invention is a pending display preview performance that can be executed during the period from when a starting winning occurs until the variable display based on the guidance winning starts. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27(A) to 12-27(E) as modification 043SG-1, a predetermined position For example, an active display area 043SG005F is provided in the center lower part of the image display device 5 in which a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as an active display, and as a third specific effect of the present invention, the display mode of the active display is It may also be possible to perform an active display preview effect that changes to ally character A-1 or ally character B-1.

In addition, when it is possible to execute the active display preview effect in this way, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, as shown in Figures 12-28 (A) and 12-28 (B). In this case, while the display mode of the active display can be changed at the first timing between the start of the variable display and the start timing of the cut-in effect, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, The display mode of the active display may be changeable between the first timing described above and the second timing between the end timing of the cut-in performance and the reach timing.

In this way, by making the active display notice effect executable from the first timing and the second timing, when the active display notice effect is executed from the first timing, part of the active display notice effect is cut-in effect. If the active display preview performance is executed from the second timing, a part of the active display preview performance will be executed overlappingly with the reach performance of Super Reach. The player's attention can be drawn to which of the first timing and the second timing the active display preview performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, as shown in Figure 12-28 (C), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β. Depending on which of the variation patterns it is, the determination ratio of the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes to ally character B-2 (timing at which the active display preview effect is executed in display pattern β) may be varied. .

By doing this, when the active display notice effect is executed from the first timing (when the cut-in effect is executed after the active display notice effect is executed from the first timing), the active display notice effect is The rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed can be different depending on when it is executed from the second timing (when the active display preview effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed), so the rate at which the super reach β reach effect is executed can be changed. The player's attention can be drawn to the execution order of the display preview performance and the cut-in performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 043SG-1, as shown in FIG. 12-28(C), when the active display preview effect is executed in the display pattern β from the second timing, it is better to use the display pattern from the first timing. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the reach effect of super reach β is executed at a higher rate than the case where the active display preview effect is executed at β, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timing When the active display preview effect is executed in the display pattern β from the second timing, the reach effect of super reach β is executed at a higher rate than when the active display preview effect is executed in the display pattern β from the second timing. It is also possible to do so.

Furthermore, in this modification 043SG-1, the first timing and second timing, which are earlier than the start timing of the reach effect, are provided as the execution timing of the active display notice effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Rather, three or more timings may be provided as the execution timings of the active display preview performance, or at least one of the execution timings of the active display preview performance may be provided during the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, the feature section 043SG of the present invention always determines the special figure display result (variable display result) as a jackpot at a ratio of 1 if the game state is the same (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the game If the state is normal or time-saving, a jackpot is always determined with a probability of 1/300, and if the gaming state is variable, a jackpot is always determined with a probability of 1/30) Form applied to pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 12-29 as modification example 043SG-2, the present invention can A pachinko game machine (so-called pachinko game with a setting function) in which any setting value can be set, and even if the gaming state is the same, the ratio of determining the special figure display result as a jackpot is different depending on the set setting value. machine).

When the present invention is applied to such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the pachinko game machine may It may be possible to execute a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting that setting values that are advantageous for the player are set in the game machine or that the setting values have been changed since the last time the Pachinko game machine was started. In addition, as such a setting suggestion effect, ally character A-5, ally character B-1, and ally character B-3 are more similar to ally character A-2 than ally character A-1 and ally character A-3. Friendly character B-5 similar to ally character B-2 can be displayed, and setting values and settings are suggested depending on whether ally character A-5 or ally character B-5 is displayed as the setting suggestion effect. The percentages indicating that the value has changed may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 043SG, the ratio at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the display pattern β suspended display notice effect is executed is the same as the super reach β reach effect after the pattern CI-2 cut-in effect is executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 is executed as modification 043SG-3. The ratio at which the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β is executed after the display pattern β is executed may be set higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect for super reach β is executed after the suspended display preview effect of the display pattern β is executed. By doing this, when the cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 is executed, the game for the reach effect of super reach β is executed more than when the suspended display preview effect of display pattern β is executed. Since the player's expectations can be increased, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 043SG, a mode in which the cut-in effect is not executed when the hold display preview effect is already being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display preview effect is not executed. There may be a case where the cut-in effect is executed even during execution.

In addition, although the feature section 043SG exemplifies a form in which execution of the pending display preview performance based on a new starting prize is not determined if the pending display preview performance is already being executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to determine execution of the pending display preview performance based on a new starting prize even if the pending display preview performance is already being executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 043SG, the performance control CPU 120 performs a super reach β reach performance in which the ally character B-3 is displayed by changing its head and body as the first specific performance in the present invention, and a reach performance in the present invention. As a second specific effect, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-2 that displays ally character B-2 with a lower head and body than ally character B-3, and as a third specific effect in the present invention, ally character B-3 is displayed as a cut-in effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the suspended display preview effect of the display pattern β that displays the ally character B-1 whose head and body are lower than the ally character B-2 can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 043SG-4, in addition to these first specific performance, second specific performance, and third specific performance, a jackpot notification performance is executed as a fourth specific performance to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It may be possible. In addition, if the jackpot notification performance is enabled, for example, in the jackpot notification performance, the ally character B-1, the ally character B-2, and the ally character B-3 have different heads and bodies, and The difference in head and body with B-3 is smaller than the difference in head and body between ally character B-2 and ally character B-3 (for example, the difference in head and body with ally character B-3 is less than 1 head and body) ), the ally character B-4, which is more similar to the ally character B-3 than the ally character B-2, may be displayed (the ally character B-3 may be displayed as the ally character B-4).

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not ally character B-3 is displayed as ally character B-4, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Incidentally, in this modification example 043SG-4, in the jackpot notification production, a form was exemplified in which ally character B-4 whose head and body difference from ally character B-3 is less than one head and body is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the ally character B-4 displayed in the jackpot notification performance may have no difference in height and height from the ally character B-3. In this case, a character that depicts the ally character B-3 in a graphic style or 3DCG may be displayed as the ally character B-4.

In other words, "similarity" in the feature section 043SG means that if it is possible to consider each character to be the same character, the characters have the same head and body, in addition to a small difference in head and body. This is a concept that includes things that have different depiction modes. Note that "the drawing style is different" refers to multiple differences such as the head and body of the ally characters B-1, B-2, and B-3, color scheme, drawing style (gekiga style, 3DCG, anime style, etc.). It is sufficient that at least one of the elements is different. For example, if ally characters B-1, B-2, and B-3 are anime-style characters with the same head and body, ally character B-1 is displayed in black and white, and ally character B-2 is displayed as ally character B-. Displaying ally character B-3 in more colors than ally character B-2, displaying ally character B-3 in more colors than ally character B-2, and displaying a difference in the number of display colors between ally character B-2 and ally character B-3. may be made smaller than the difference in the number of display colors between ally character B-1 and ally character B-2. In addition, if ally characters B-1, B-2, and B-3 are 3DCG characters with the same head and body, ally character B-1 is configured with the least number of polygons, and ally character B-3 is configured with the least number of polygons. If you configure it with the largest number of polygons and make the difference in the number of polygons between ally character B-2 and ally character B-3 smaller than the difference in the number of polygons between ally character B-1 and ally character B-2. good.

In addition, in this modified example 043SG-1, as shown in FIG. 12-28, a first timing and a second timing are provided as timings at which the active display notice effect can be executed in display pattern β, and , the ratio of executing the active display preview effect in display pattern β from the first timing, which is before the execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-2, and the second timing, which is after the execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-2. Although the timing and the rate at which the active display notice effect is executed in display pattern β are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this example. The rate at which the active display notice effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed in the display pattern β is the rate at which the reach effect for the super reach β is executed after the active display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, and the rate at which the reach effect for the super reach β is executed after the active display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, It may be set lower than the ratio at which the super reach β reach effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed at -2. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to frequent execution of active display preview effects in the display pattern β.

In addition, in the feature section 043SG, as a form of abstraction in the present invention, a form is exemplified in which the display proportion of the head of the ally character B-3 is increased (the head and body are lowered), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, as an abstraction in the present invention, the display ratio of parts other than the head, such as the arms and legs of the ally character B-3, may be increased.

In addition, the feature section 043SG uses the humanoid ally characters A-3 and B-3 as objects of abstraction in the present invention, and increases the display proportion occupied by the heads of these ally characters A-3 and B-3. Although the form in which the ally characters A-1, A-2, B-1, and B-2 can be displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters to be abstracted may be a dog or a dog. Non-humanoid characters such as animals and plants such as sunflowers, vehicles such as helicopters and tanks, and collections of stylized character strings (logos), and the proportion of display that is occupied by the characteristic parts of each character (for example, abstract If the object to be abstracted is a sunflower, the display proportion occupied by the flower, if the object to be abstracted is a helicopter, the display proportion indicated by the main rotor, if the object to be abstracted is a logo, the display proportion occupied by a specific character) is displayed. It may be possible.

In addition, in the feature section 043SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is defined as a gaming machine that performs at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

Further, in this specification, a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are illustrated as examples of the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may also be implemented by combining these plurality of characteristic parts and modification examples. Alternatively, only one feature or modification may be implemented.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body that is operable;
A display means capable of displaying a staged image;
a production execution means capable of executing a specific production that displays a specific character on the display means to suggest the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance,
a first specific effect that displays the specific character in a first mode in which a display ratio of specific components and non-specific components of the specific character is a first ratio;
The specific character is displayed in a mode different from the first mode, and the display ratio of the specific component and the non-specific component in the specific character is lower than the first ratio. a second specific effect that is displayed in a second mode having a second proportion in which the proportion of the constituent elements is high;
The specific character is displayed in a mode different from the first mode and the second mode, and the display ratio of the specific component and the non-specific component in the specific character is lower than the first ratio. a third specific effect that is displayed in a third mode in which the specific component has a high proportion in the specific character;
is executable,
The performance execution means is
The first specific effect can be executed without executing the second specific effect after executing the third specific effect,
The first specific effect can be executed after the second specific effect is executed without executing the third specific effect,
The first aspect is such that a percentage difference in the display percentage of the specific component in the specific character between the first percentage and the second percentage is a difference between the first percentage and the third percentage. is smaller than a percentage difference in the display ratio of the specific component in the specific character, and is more similar to the second embodiment than the third embodiment;
The rate at which the first specific effect is executed without executing the second specific effect after the third specific effect is executed is such that the second specific effect is executed without executing the third specific effect. Unlike the rate at which the first specific effect is executed after being executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect of displaying a non-specific character different from the specific character in the third mode as the third specific effect,
In the third specific performance, when the specific character is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the non-specific character is displayed, and the displayed specific character and the Non-specific characters do not change into other characters,
A gaming machine comprising: a restriction means for restricting execution of a new third specific performance when the third specific performance is being executed.